Home

2014 Jeep Patriot Owner`s Manual

1. 335 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 352 Hill Climbing isses 337 FIL escent CORDE IDC FEEQUIDDOS vadit Driving Through Water 000000 339 Hill Start Assist HSA 00 355 After Driving Off Road isses 341 Electronic Stability Control ESC 357 M POWER STEERING 00 000 00005 343 2 a ica ME AE Power Steering Fluid Check 343 A STARTING AND OPERATING 309 M TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 362 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Tire Markings i e 362 Weeks He EQUAPD GO Gehen dits eye id Tire Identification Number TIN 365 Compact spare Ties TEPQUIDDSU a uestes dd Tire Terminology And Definitions 367 ux M E om Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 368 DODGE tea PERE PERERA ame E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 372 c E Tire Pressure 372 DEE QE Tire Inflation Pressures 373 Se eng tae ahead etate tubus Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 374 Replacement Tires llle 381 Radial Ply Tires 200 0000 esses esses gg M TIRE CHAINS IRACTON DEVICES Giai pee All Season Tires If Equipped guo BEE ROTATION RECOMMENDANONG Aisne 988 Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 376 E ME di anon EM 384 SHOW ITIeS ae shana tuse reas p
2. IN 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MH A A W Maintenance Chart N 4 sm Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following 34 pages for the required maintenance intervals N A Mileage or time passed whichever comes first o oleo ele eleilss S SsasSg d poss 3 3 38 8 8 8 3 8 8 3 8 8 8 8 E 3 3 3 3 35 8 818 s s S OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 e i olololololo lo H Or Kilometers S g z 8 8 3 sisis sis sis 9 232sgs 292 2 8 8 8 3 8 Additional Inspections 34 Inspect the CV joints SJ Inspect front suspension boot seals tie rod ends X X X I and replace if necessary Inspect brake linings replace if necessary Check park brake function adjust if necessary A x 4 x A a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499 j A Mileage or time passed whichever comes first gt o oleo eee 8 8 8 8 sa sik TERM 81888888 8 88 83 858 IE SSL BS IR BIS IS a e2 rz u OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kiometer 33 88888588888885g8n s 3 8 8 5 8 3 8 9 898 8 3 E Additional Maintenance S Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X Replace air conditioning cabin air filter X X X X X X X E Replace spark plugs X X X X B Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or X X U 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first E Replace rear drive assembly
3. E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 420 CONTENTS E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 420 ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING sees 421 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 422 Jack Location 3 er ab oe ae 422 Spare Tire Stowage ee 423 O Preparations For Jacking 423 Jacking Instructions 0004 424 Road Tire Installation 431 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 433 Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE E SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE B TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 441 With Ignition Key isses 442 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even thoug
4. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS MW INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 210 Compass Temperature Audio 231 B INSTRUMENT CLUSTER es 20 curs nasa 211 Average Fuel Economy MW INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 212 Distance To Empty DTE Bl MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED 225 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 232 Control Buttons 6 2 0 0 eee 226 Elapsed Time roy ara aa 00 0000 cae 232 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Display Units of Measure in 233 SERIES QUI EDO DD pda ignoti ad Personal Settings Customer Programmable H Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Features s a em er e se ae ees e 233 EQUIPPED 2 stie eh ge dee e Rs 230 E Uconnect 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND EVIC Functions l l 231 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK o rr ratonera EINE 239 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO 247 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 249 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA A RA 252 INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA A OCHO 252 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 255 Uconnect amp 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED 00 259 Operating Instructions Voice Command S
5. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK The driver s door is opened The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure Close all doors and place the key in the ignition Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK five times ending up in the ON RUN position do not start the engine Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in t
6. es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions e Compass Temperature Audio Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Units In Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the f
7. for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the best fuel economy The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the LOW range to select a lower gear ratio Under these conditions using a lower gear ratio will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transmission oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat indicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough A STARTING AND OPERATING 331 to allow a return to the requested speed This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the high speed is maintained the overheating may reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion LOW Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range the transmission will down shift for maximum engine braking and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature pro viding manual shift co
8. Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 070339986 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is
9. For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 N eR U al UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not relea
10. or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the te button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Ke button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the Ke button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Theref
11. 1022606150 Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Tether Anchorage Locations a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a no
12. 2ser ge ed iae rimor dins aa i 212 Odometet ma Tas serae Re m D Reges 221 Tachometer llle eee 215 Gear Ranges llle 320 Gear Select Lever Override 05 439 General Information so soos rrise 000s eee 18 Glass Cleaning coccion er UR ERR et d 482 Gross Axle Weight Rating 403 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 401 GVWR iaa bare ete Hated ae ti 401 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 111 Hazard Warning Flasher 200 420 Headlighis pa Ce ere Rene rre des n 489 Cleaning i 2b oe B3 err be pa E Rehd 482 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 165 PASSING ide obe e P Oe dee Re ee es 165 A Rp era AR end 489 Switch 4499 a e RE E E Re Rs 163 Head Restraints llle 154 Heated Mirrors se sarua inea ug Ka eR 110 Heated Seats 22i ee ee 149 loto LIC 294 Heater Engine Block 0 0 00 002 sse 314 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 165 Hill Descent Control 000000005 224 Hill Start Assist ous RR RR Rx 355 Hitches Trailer TO WINE cure nene ated RR RU e d 406 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 175 A INDEX 521 Hood Release 2 0 ce 160 unu A E E EEEE 12 A 12 Ignition Key Removal ooooooooooo 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key ooooooooo oo 15 Infant Restraint o ooo o 76 Information Center Vehicle 227 Inside Rearview Mirror o o
13. Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be e
14. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the
15. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu J Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 2012 Chrysler Group LLC amp SECTION TABLE OF
16. 0 0 0 cee eee eae Recreational Towing se eces si ea maansa dibeh Reformulated Gasoline 526 INDEX IN Retrigerant i ed eno m eon ace dd 459 Reminder Seat Belt 59 Remote Control Door hocks npe e as a 20 Security Alarm iii ete ei 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Remote Starting System css 6 6 eee eee 26 Replacement Bulbs o o o o ooo ooo 488 Replacement Keys 0 0 000 cee eee eens 16 Replacement Parts 1 0 0 cee eee eee 451 Replacement Tires 000000000004 381 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 509 Restraint Head 0 0 0 ee ees 154 Restraints Child llle 76 Restraints Occupants secari pua gi ee 39 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 197 Roll Over Warning 6 6 oe 4 Root Type Carrier arica io hehe es 204 Rotation Tires 2 2 e a iea a eala e ao ee 383 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 99 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 102 Safety Defects Reporting oooooomoo oo ooo 509 Safety Exhaust Gas s eiii ds a eee 98 Safety Information Tires ris tegese sissies ti 362 Safely JTipS essais ld oes 98 Satellite Radio Antenna oe c ei seice pea a 256 Schedule Maintenance 000 00008 496 Seat Belt Maintenance 0000 483 Seat Belt Reminder o oooooooommm ooo oooo 59 Seat Belts sr orewesee a a ida 39 Adjustable Shoulder
17. 136 kg Trailer Tow Prep Package AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers A STARTING AND OPERATING 409 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of t
18. 4 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 060633619 mm Mounting Spare Tire CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly 430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 7 Finish tightening the nuts Push down o
19. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Folding Outside Mirrors The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved manually either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Mirrors The power mirror control is located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Control To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror
20. B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage 374 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 ps
21. Commands i susce cue E a 142 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 159 Voice Training sse 146 M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 160 MESEATS rone ien ostras onde inis 147 WEIGH Ss tias aa detis 162 Power Seats If Equipped 148 Multifunction Lever oo ooooooo oo 162 Heated Seats If Equipped 149 Headlights And Parking Lights 163 Manual Front Seat Adjustment 150 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 163 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Lights On Reminder 0 0 163 Equippedi excuse ny idee nes e tae 152 Fog Lights If Equipped esse 163 e SE ee Turn Signals area ca 164 Driver s Seatback Recline 153 High Low Beam Switch 165 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 154 Flash To Pass a 165 Head Restraints cde m ea 154 Instrument Panel Dimming 165 Folding Rear Seat 1 2 0 0 000000 158 Map Reading Lights e000 166 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 ll WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 167 To Accelerate For Passing 174 Windshield Wiper Operation 168 M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 175 Intermittent Wiper System 169 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 176 Windshield Was
22. Delete a paired phone a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the Ne button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Ke button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the 3 prompts You can also press the Ne button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the amp e button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Traini
23. NING dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web In a collision an unrestrained child can become a site for additional information http www tc gc ca projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Con vertible Child Restraint facing rear ward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Larger Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the ve hicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat b
24. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle be raised while the vehicle is being jacked e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in Jacking Instructions REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a Continued service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 WARNING Continued CAUTION Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on lifting this vehicle during a tire change locations other than those indicated in the Jacking e If working on or near a roadway be extremely instructions for this vehicle careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE Refer to Tires General Information in Start ing And Operating for further information about the spare tire it s use and operation 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare whee
25. RDA fluid X X S Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid X X 8 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police X taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing CVT only M 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MH IM Mileage or time passed whichever comes first o o o ololo oa eo S S S S S 3S v is p 1388 8 818 818 18 8 8 8 8 8 T S S8 BS R si sl sl el al 3 2 58 E T T T T OrYears 2 3 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o olo o S S S S S S S 2 3 e 888 88 3 8 8 8 8 8 3 8 8 E o t tooco lr zs ET 2 2 8 A fy Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X fed CVT only ill Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter E 6 speed only if you frequently drive on rough or P unpaved roads on mountain roads on short trips X L in heavy city traffic during hot weather or if you 3j use the vehicle for police taxi fleet or frequent fy trailer towing 8 a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 A Mileage or time passed whichever comes first o o o o o o o o Sg S lt SsS ssg l TERM 81888888 8 88 83 858 IE amp 88 8 R 38 8 F E SFZ elp OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ssssssssiisssg a o 5 5 N co e
26. Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap 1 If the RKE transmitter i
27. This will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills with improved control and less effort NOTE For maximum off road performance premium fuel is recommended While the vehicle will operate on regular fuel when in L Off Road mode the engine has been calibrated for maximum performance using pre mium fuel Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the transaxle to low L Off Road if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum 336 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM s or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates
28. Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH A STARTING AND OPERATING 401 The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size th
29. Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Appli
30. mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to A STARTING AND OPERATING 377 original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
31. nm WARNING 1 Turn the engine OFF Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener 2 Firmly apply the parking brake ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN shift lever override access cover located on the right position but do not start the engine Side OF Ihe iba 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port and push and hold the override release lever forward 7 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 051010792 Shift Lever Override Access Cover a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow NONE e Transmission in NOT ALLOWED NEUTRAL e Key in ACC or ON RUN position Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front FWD Models ONLY FWD Models ONLY Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES IN With Ignition Key Manual Transmission A
32. noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is ven
33. one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change When the LOW level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 30 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long peri ods of time Continued This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a
34. or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child into the retractor For additional information on ALR Restraints in this Vehicle refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 022668725 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint tighten the seat bel
35. swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the A STARTING AND OPERATING 405 tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used WARNING in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing system may reduce handling stability braking safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control performance and could result in a collision also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue reational Vehicle dealer for additional information Weights TW and may
36. vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline to
37. 26 Hill Descent Indicator If Equipped A e The symbol illuminates is armed when the 4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position Off Road Mode 27 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped FO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 28 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol system ESC has been turned off by the driver 29 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped tw The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ee Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Each time the ignition is t
38. Back Up sa oe ete mer Eee e S tae 490 Brake Assist Warning srce tinpi uoa pipi 360 Brake Warning 6 66 trinity ni 215 Bulb Replacement 0 0000 489 A ain ee Oe ees co haved Ee 196 Center Mounted Stop llle 490 Daytime Running 5 0 0 163 Dimmer Switch Headlight 162 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 360 Engine Temperature Warning 215 o 24 5 4468 Ldbg SR ee SR ROS a 102 FOG iii ae ey tec Rete ale eer ae 163 FOAM SIS 5a 2923 drehte a urere hes 163 Headlight Switch 0 0 0 00000 163 High Beam een date aed Rees 165 High Beam Indicator oo oooooooooo ne 214 High Beam Low Beam Select 165 Instrument Cluster 0 00000 eee 163 License veria weed eva ea eee eas 490 Lights On Reminder o ooo oooooooooo o 163 Low Fuel orion e b o RR 213 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 223 Map Reading 000000000 166 OU Pressure vila RAO Ae c RE GONE UC S 213 Seat Belt Reminder llle 214 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 SEVE ra nasegce dera pde DEA CX C SU 489 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 217 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 219 Traction Controls docs eo wearable dow desa 360 A INDEX 523 Tu Signal vas aac Pace ens a os 102 Voltage ase stes s at do Hel E dnd qs 212 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 212 Loading Vehi
39. Canadian Residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if equipped KG will contain the two contr
40. Ee erus 376 Base System iem mk eee va ed dds 386 310 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Premium System If Equipped 389 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 400 General Information o o oo oooo o 393 BM VEHICLE LOADING 0 0 400 B FUEL REQUIREMENTS 393 Vehicle Certification Label 400 2 0L And 2 4L Engine i i sls re a 393 M TRAILER TOWING 9 2v ka e Ra 402 Reformulated Gasoline 394 Common Towing Definitions 403 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 394 Trailer Hitch Classification 406 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 395 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer MMT In Gasoline ics 396 PA di quoted audivit es ud Materials Added To Fuel isses a A Tae ee acai oa manner m Fuel System Cautions 000 396 TONED Dea E xd Carbon Monoxide Warnings 397 TOWING DUS Cb ob TREES DESIG ER ated Se B ADDING FUEL sees 299 M RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 398 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 416 A STARTING AND OPERATING 311 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and
41. Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle h
42. LOW or REVERSE position 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
43. Mode ccce 288 esi MA MR E D ME Equipped sa gheet d d e neds asta ee 298 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 290 Operating ips c ccce 304 ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 292 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Demisters 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio 5 Storage Bin 6 Glove Compartment 7 Climate Controls 8 Power Outlet 040107732 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 11 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040335395 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Reminder t When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experien
44. Restraint is deployed Rear Head Restraints The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for information on Tether routing 030906210 Rear Seat Release Strap UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just 030906211 enough to release the seatback latch Then push the seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap Folded Rear Seat To raise the seatback pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only with the vehicle is parked TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 031306200 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING T
45. STARTING AND OPERATING 361 malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e Each time the ignition is cycled ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation b lt lt Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or fully off The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings bi 5 vni00 589 id y d 5 zar v NOY 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designa
46. Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles 034033576 176 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Eras
47. The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed with mild soap and water Removable Load Floor 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Cargo Tie Down Loops WARNING There are four tie downs D rings installed in the cargo A e jie area for securing cargo Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible Cargo Area Tie Downs S Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 WARNING Continued Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projec
48. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out plate into the buckle until you hear a click the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 3 M Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The Latch Plate 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop 4 erly In a sudden stop you could move too far likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used tog
49. YOUR VEHICLE 171 Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the WARNING steering column up or down as desired Push the lever Do not adjust the steering column while driving up to lock the steering column firmly in place Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv AN ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Tilt Steering Column Lever 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec right side of the steering wheel tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use
50. a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire 378 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life W
51. a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and ESC turned off Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to redu
52. a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and con vertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simp
53. be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Power Seais If Equipped WARNING Some models may be equipped with a power driver s seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt CAUTION Do not place any article under a powe
54. be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 406 STARTING AND OPERATING MH Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max Trailer Hitch In the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can dustry Standards tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area MA UNa Sain Da tongue We Gross Trailer Wt See Note 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs
55. but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compart ment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control
56. children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic trans mission in PARK a manual transmission in RE VERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately A STARTING AND OPERATING 347 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will b
57. contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will displa
58. could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Continued designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll ov
59. disassembled for any reason Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Flu
60. display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmission Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection RKE Unlock When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn with lock feature selected Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed T
61. except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the amp vRbutton and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Evrbutton and say 3 7 4 6 Send 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this fea
62. following beep say Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook Phonebook Erase All from which you choose To select one of the entries The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you m from the list press the VR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook Delete e Press the ke button to begin e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will Note that only the phonebook in the current language ask you which designation you wish to delete home is deleted work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e Press the w button to begin e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the Sve but ton during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit
63. if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehic
64. important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 328 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose
65. in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR5518002015B 267T S180015B United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 0L And 2 4L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us gd ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 5 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium Ric is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 394 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel prop
66. in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could s do be ee A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE 5 let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tight ened vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Continued 400 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in
67. low beam 10 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Befor
68. manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counter clockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to lis
69. next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a st
70. not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Continued Air Bag Warning Light O You will want to have the air bags ready to ry inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
71. not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if 115 Volt Power Outlet plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will 035006145 discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting WARNING T th o avoid serious injury or dea Continued e Do not use a three prong adaptor e Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Continued 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION Continued mete RES e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Your vehide is equipped with four cupholders There are vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat two illuminated cupholders located in the front tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear STORAGE passengers Glove Compartment And Storage Bin Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment 035106215 4 Rear Cupholders 035209107 Storage Bins 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment 194 UNDERSTAN
72. of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitiga tion ERM Hill Descent Control HDC Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All sys tems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information A STARTING AND OPERATING 351 WARNING Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase
73. of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever r
74. operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac turer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other
75. or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate STARTING AND OPERATING 345 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 346 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave
76. or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 throat irritation move to fresh air If th
77. outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re i move the key fob from the ignition When leaving Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake 5 in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped the vehicle always lock your vehicle press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with lever in NEUTRAL access to an unlocked vehicle NOTE e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil pressed to the floor dren should be warned not to touch the parking e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked brake brake pedal or the shift lever rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Continued 312 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Tip Start Do not press the accelerator Turn
78. over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing
79. personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight ness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The
80. place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information A STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for the first condition that it dete
81. positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 14MK74 126 AB Second Edition Printed in U S A
82. protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acqui
83. radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turn ing the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the
84. rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles
85. requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Cooling System Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignit
86. retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 397 CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Fo
87. retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of
88. salt or road film 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised wh
89. seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Manual Front Seat Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Manual Lumbar If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard a lever located on the outboard side of the seat Pull side of the driver s seatback Rotate the lever downward upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward downward on the lever to lower the seat height to decr
90. should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to re
91. size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 383 CAUTION The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are does not apply to some directional tires that must not be used reversed TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at gt different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal ram rates C These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres E E sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires E Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 055707139 Tire Rotation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main tenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 384 STARTING AND OPERATING HN TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the out
92. the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number 8ency your mobile phone must be This feature is supported in the U S Canada and turned on Mexico e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage To use you Uconnect Phone System in an emer NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country Roadsice esintanced Towing nesses where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and If you need roadside assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not P ite Webutton to besi be applicable with the available mobile service and area Tune UE cd e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the w button and say Setup followed by Emergency a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE You should program the desired Towing Assis tance phone number using the Voice Command system To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance When prompted say 1 800 528 2069 for the U S say 1 877 213 4525 for Canada say 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for out side Mexico City in Mexico Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly
93. the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 WARNING Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubrican
94. the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device in a similar
95. the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres sures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no
96. the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Sl
97. the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism i J 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to r
98. to Safe Off Road Driving in Start ing and Operating for further information When HDC is properly enabled the Hill Decent Control Light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC Full Off mode This is done by pressing and holding the ESC Off button for five seconds Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of the manual HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h HDC will no longer function If the HDC Indicator Light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool A STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintai
99. to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 7 and 74 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the 3 button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the KE button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the amp button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 4 COOL OR COLD Press the 7 amp 5 button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 74 and 4 then turn the air o TC E conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 32 and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near A If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between A and E In very cold weather Ms if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 646 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 545 e 311 Five Speed Manual Transmission 314 Ma
100. transfer of the call language selection SEMPUS LODS After selecting one of the languages all prompts and After the ignition is cycled to OFF a call can continue voice commands will be in that language on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language e An active call is automatically transferred to the mo specific and is usable across all languages bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF Emergency Assistance Eonnecte Phone reallres If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is Language Selection reachable To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency e Press the button to begin mumber soy potipales e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly e Press the Ne button to begin WARNING e After
101. turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors If Equipped Ittt These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward 030406199 Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support e US residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e
102. vehicle is not moving 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Control Buttons 040541179 Mini Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func tions Odometer Trip A Trip B RESET Button To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel The following displays can be reset or changed e Trip A e Trip B Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the STEP button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041035271 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC consists of the following System Status Units Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Heading Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions 041036449
103. windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the Integrated Center Stack ICS for added conve nience This power outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Sy WI NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the pow
104. 20 Amp Radio Amplifiers 13 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Yellow Yellow 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 20 15 Amp Radio 27 10 Amp Airbag Control Lt Blue Red Module 21 10 Amp Intrusion Module 28 10 Amp Airbag Control Red Siren If Equipped Red Module Occupant 22 10 Amp Heating AC Compass Classification Module Red 29 Hot Car No Fuse 23 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay Required Lt Blue 30 20 Amp Heated Seat If 24 15 Amp Power Sunroof If Yellow Equipped Lt Blue Equipped 31 10 Amp Headlamp Washer If 25 10Amp Heated Mirror If Red Equipped Red Equipped 32 30 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay 26 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay Pink Lt Blue A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 33 10 Amp J1962 Conn Red Powertrain Control Module 34 30 Amp Antilock BrakeValve Pink 35 40 Amp Antilock Brake Pump Green 36 30 Amp Headlamp Washer Pink Control Smart Glass If Equipped 37 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater If Natural Equipped CAUTION When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it
105. 353 engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will WARNING occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability user s safety or the safety of others Control ESC in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes 354 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer
106. 39 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero cancel one confirmation prompts two continue three delete four dial five download six edit seven emergency eight English nine erase all star Espanol plus Francais pound help add location home all language call list names 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s list phones set up phone settings or phone mobile set up mute towing assistance mute off transfer call new entry Uconnect Tutorial no voice training other work pair a phone yes prone paui paing General Information phonebook phone book previous This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and record again RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the redial following conditions return to main menu return or main menu e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by select phone select the party responsible for compliance could void the send user s authority to operate the equipment a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice
107. 8 Dire Markinps sere ber nerea XR HE a 362 jb RTT 102 Aging Life of Dres 25e soba Ee 380 Aut Pressure cia Puestos ee e duo aie wea a 372 Ch itis ese iE EUR RR eR Ten das 382 Changing nest enen bruce eR ndo tile oia 422 Compact Spare s adega a llle 377 General Information 00 372 High Speed ns irog au as a pere eras 374 Inflation PressureS o o ooooooo oo oo 373 Jacking ir s epa 422 Life of Dies cose ys 380 Load Capacity xau ad a eem RR en 368 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 384 Pressure Warning Light ne INDEX 529 Quality Grading cse ee ere 511 A PDA SUE ae eee 375 Replacement sii e hy noe ies ivan ded 381 Rotation iubens Shee ew bo er OUR SCR 383 Safely sectis aee epe ede ah hg ers 362 SIZES 2223 dean Sete aires Saree tee REA ER ae 363 Snow Tires 225 4 5 24448235 Rees 4008 98 28 qus 376 Spare Tires 4 cuisses doc the siesta dote atta dedos 423 Spinning iege E eR eam AUR e eds 379 Trailer Towing iie REX eX Meee ess 411 Tread Wear Indicators 0 00005 379 Tire Safety Information o oooooooomoooo ooo 362 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 408 TOWING Loi icr sos doe a bos ea anata 402 24 Hour Towing Assistance o o o o o o o 124 Disabled Vehicle llle 441 Guide RR ORAE GR Rows 407 Recreational usse o teg 416 Towing Assistance oie ra kee ats 124 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 416 Trailer TO WIDE cyber
108. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Doors Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e e e e e Gate with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open and A single chime Headlamps or Park Lamps On Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted System Fault Key In Ignition Low Tire Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System Service TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure
109. ANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
110. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the Power Window Switch Location ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended Auto Down 021906196 children can become entrapped by the windows o while operating the power window switches Such The drivers door window switch has an Auto Down entrapment may result in serious injury or death feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key tha
111. Belt 48 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Women oooooooooooooo o 61 Child Resttaint aco oc n ro ee aca ite 76 Extender PRI Up ub xr ed 60 Front Seat sci cca gah he hoes e Eae e ded d 43 A INDEX 527 Inspection ses eae GG em e o A 99 PretensiOn8ts Lg ii eb ae Eua tok 55 Rear Seat x44 deba ede ad a eed 43 Untwisting Procedure lt s sss ewa sanai SEESE Ea 52 Seals p eaa haea t devi Y Va d bed wes 147 ACIUSIMENE ai d RIPE der RARE ER s 147 Heated iiu oda dated id bdo a ete ee ke 149 Lumbar Support l l 152 Rear Folding i eese ads RR 158 Rear Folding Sedan 04 158 Seatback Release se Ru epe es 153 Til ng 22cm ERR E RES 153 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Sentry Key Immobilizer o oo o ooooo 15 Sentry Key Programming ooooooooooooo 17 Sentry Key Replacement 000 16 Service ASSISTANCE science a CORR RR CR D EGRE s 505 Service Contract i oem a i eunka d xe e s 507 Service Manuals 510 Settings Personal cocos e eere uen s 233 Setting the Clock sisse t debe ne aree UR deg 240 Shift Lever Override llle 439 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 316 Shoulder Belts i4 eode RR we EG ane 43 Side Airbag idu Ee it dera in ala 70 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 305 Sigrials Turn sog vgn emg o E RUE 102 Snow Chains Tire C
112. Brakes tai Reni x RE eh nn 344 Passing Lie hts ita taste eut e mpeg 165 Personal Settings 4 5 zie rer E ERE oes 233 e dion deed ea aed es bo des RGAE shee E Bed 96 Pets Transporting sc ee ciate o Re e bed as 96 Phone Cellular 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 111 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 111 Placard Tire and Loading Information 368 Power Door Locks 4 546 RR ERR ee eas 31 lolsn PPP 109 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 187 TESTS suu tage kala ees ace etre sce RI ER an 343 Sunr Of Lists cee UR UR X Eq RE pe 184 Transfer Unit caseras eI ESSE 477 W ndOWS ve ed ces seed dar a 35 Power Steering Fluid ssec sia 493 Power Transfer Unit o o o ooooooooo 477 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 61 Preparation for Jacking ooooooooooo o 423 Pretensioners Seat Belts sole Lie x REPRE AR REA 55 Programmable Electronic Features 233 Radial Ply Dres peace ee dc ren ca 375 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 468 Radio Operation 0 6 66 6 eee 294 Rear Axle Differential o o oo ooo 477 Rear Drive Assembly ooooooooooooo o 477 Rear Liftgate Sedan oooooommmm ooo 37 Rear Seat Folding 1 2 6 0 06 cee eee 158 Rearview Mirrors 6 6 0 eee eee 107 Rear Window Defroster o o ooo oo o ooo 203 Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer 0 0 0000000000000 Recorder Event Data
113. C system shuts off ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds 360 STARTING AND OPERATING HN so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the ESC On mode of operation NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC in the Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light Lal ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a A
114. CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION ctestetetecsedeatesesen tp etastinta drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sisse eee 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 ee 103 EJ UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ie nenne 207 A STARTING AND OPERATING avia Deuda theod rk dere wks Dau v pa Dawa ters 307 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 tre sa e e Ec REDE EY TTE E EROR RUE BR IUE Rd Rd 419 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE sisters 445 MAINTENANCE BCHEDUDES ihren tud ope S PR ERES VC Ede UE man bd colas 495 E IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 46er tke ERRARE REX ERR CREER RE 503 9 INDEX ss 513 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS M INTRODUCTION 000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 M ROLLOVER WARNING 2 0 4 M VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 ll WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION IN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
115. Command System Operation The Uconnect Voice Command system allows t VR you to control your AM FM radio disk player USB mass storage class device iPod family of devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command Sve button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command amp vRbutton while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time yo
116. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on Door Storage IDE Se ense hangs Ihe interior door panels are equipped with lower storage areas 035206143 Glove Compartment 035206217 Front Door Storage a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open 035206216 Rear Door Storage CONSOLE FEATURES The floor console contains both an upper and lower storage compartment 035306219 Upper Storage Compartment 19 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on WARNING the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart ment and lift the lid open Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart 7 ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and Lower Storage Compartment part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED 035306220 a UNDERSTANDING
117. DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in a
118. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condition
119. E CAUTION CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN been programmed to the vehicle electronics Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle dealer or by following the customer key programming electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle procedure This procedure consists of programming a Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one be programmed to any other vehicle that has never been programmed Replacement Keys NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure Cut the additional Se
120. ECOGNITION WARMING BUTTON AU UCONNECT HAZARD BUTTON m AIC PUSH BEE OWNER AR MANUAL BO CONDITIONER CONTROL OFF 010533317 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body on the right front seat crossmember under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B NE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Rearming The System oooomooooo o 19 Ignition Key Removal les
121. ET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Connecting The iPod Or Extern
122. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side the hood near the center and raise the hood facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 031306201 Hood Safety Latch Location m Se Prop Rod Location 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open 8 in 20 cm approximately and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever Headlights And Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent to turn on th
123. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the AVR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect amp Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the Eve button and say Se lect or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or
124. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation A STARTING AND OPERATING 343 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as poss
125. LOCK engaged and proceed with caution Allow engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed A STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To d
126. ON 508 Be Reasonable With Requests 505 B MOPAR PARTS 0 000008 509 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 505 Bi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 509 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 506 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 509 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 506 O In Canada Rer E eS 509 In Mexico Contact 507 B PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 510 9 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HI ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cessi aeaeaie S a acea 511 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 511 Trad Wed estat a cate 511 Temperature Grades 0 0000 512 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items
127. ON DO NOT use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 447 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 24L 448 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 449 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 449 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 1 22 rey eu error retar des 450 W REPLACEMENT PARIS xac RO as a 451 B DEALER SERVICE x3 EY V3 Rr e 451 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 452 Engine OI aci td e pen 453 Engine Oil Filter 1 ni 456 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 456 Maintenance Free Battery 457 Air Conditioner Maintenance 458 Body Lubrication oooooooooooo Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System suertea se 00 0000 cee O Cooling System ooooooooooooooo 465 Brake System 1 0 6 0 eee eee 471 446 MAINTAINING YOUR
128. Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months Change Indicator System whichever comes first e Change oil and filter Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual required wear or damage e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake and park Brake master cylinder power steering and fill as needed Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Check function of all interior and exterior lights e Inspect exhaust system Required Maintenance Intervals e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following off road conditions page for the required maintenance intervals
129. Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for ram Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire 366 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 a STARTING AND OPERA
130. R INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button Use the SELECT button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano Francais or NL de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE Uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in Uconnect phone If Equipped for details Auto Lock Doors When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the SELECT button when in this
131. RIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9570RTA P195 70R14 T125 70D15 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ca 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 055001823 2 total weight your vehicle can carry B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard A STARTING AND OPERATING 369 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if
132. RP E e 402 Cooling System Tips 00 0000 415 A euer RR eod 406 Minimum Requirements sess 409 o ip a a Gase 414 Trailer and Tongue Weight 408 WIRING e ces ee sc We Rae Bae Ga i SR Rer Bi 412 Trailer Towing Guide 0 0 00 000005 407 Trailer Weight 13e on Guise tana dee dame 407 Transaxle AULOMAUC pornstar ae Ae P e 12 Transmission AULOMAUC s ce oacne3 eed cage bee eis 317 Fl ld use titan A caesus e aces te i 473 Manual ss etes tere e ies sty eae ee ats e 314 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 530 INDEX IN Tread Wear Indicators 0 200000 379 Trip Computers iaceo dt gr eor RR Ege dere 225 Trip Odometer eris ridesine eX RE E ne 221 Trip Odometer Reset Button 219 Turn Signals ci anaes a o ER os 164 UCI Connector exista mh DR ee 285 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 111 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 210 Uniform Tire Quality Grades o ooo o 511 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 285 Universal Transmitter o o o o o oooooo o 175 Unleaded Gasoline 2 0 0 0 0000000040 393 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 52 Vanity Mirrors sa cs exe Rr E a ee a 110 Variance Compass esu dauden ad as 237 Vehicle Certification Label 400 Vehicle Identification Number
133. Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your autho
134. Serviced at Authorized Dealer a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Bulb Number 2 Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out Rear Tail Stop Lamp LED Assembly Serviced ee at Authorized Dealer 3 Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb Rear Turn Lamp 7440NA WY21W Amber by pulling straight back Backup Lamp 7440 W21W Crystal 4 Twist the bulb to the left License Lamp SM 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers cs E could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric lf conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually Fog Lamps accelerate the clearing process BP 1 Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout Headlamps 2 Remove electrical connector from bulb 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp 3 Remove bulb from housing 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION License Lamps 1 Usea screw driver to gently pry against the side of the Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 2 Rotate t
135. T Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in 364 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits A STARTING AND OPERATING 365 EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry this tire Maximum
136. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for twice for low and a third time to return to off convenience Press in on the flashlight to release it 035410217 Three Press Switch Cargo Cover Flashlight Location Press To Release The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide into one of the two notches located in the rear trim the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward of the rear trim panel on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel 035406966 Cargo Cover Guides Rear Trim Notches a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING ey dh In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Removable Load Floor
137. TING 367 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 368 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR side door THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR XXX Las TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE O
138. Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un None defined Adult Hits Adit Hit ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Program Type TO ial Program Type aa Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather Oldies Oldies By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Personality Persnlty is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Public Public station with the same selected Music Type name The Rhythm and Blues R amp B Music Type function only operates when in the FM Religious Music R
139. Uconnect phone Displays if equipped EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Audio Mode Display A on Tire Pressure Monitor TEM Press and release the MENU button to scroll MENU through the main menus Fuel Economy Warn The system allows the driver to select information by ings Timer Units System Personal Settings pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering or to exit sub menus wheel COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access gt to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu DOWN Button V Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the sub menus When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion manual transmission Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open
140. VEHICLE HN Automatic Transmission 6 speed If Equipped socia die acne alsa dn d 473 Manual Transmission If Equipped 476 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only exo epe aere nae eae 477 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only sesser iesen siaii 477 Appearance Care And Protection From COPOSION DE 478 NM FUSES cae eae ce hi wna OR see ee renee 483 Integrated Power Module 483 B VEHICLE STORAGE 4424932 nierit ias 487 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 5k onan ac 488 MW BULB REPLACEMENT 45x x 489 Headlamps cse mee med 489 Fog LAMPS caede Aa AHR maa ed 489 Rear Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 490 License Lamps s ee Re 490 Center High Mounted Stoplamp 490 B FLUID CAPACITIES i4 a rz taawas ahaa 491 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS 492 ENGINE aio aaa I ee ER 492 Chassis eure vere ne rev ed ue peu 493 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 070339986 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3
141. VIN 7 Vehicle Loading ees kr Re ews 369 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storages 5 verae tiie dede d 304 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Voice Recognition System VR o o o o o 141 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 212 Warning Roll Over o ooooooooooooooooo 4 Warnings and Cautions o o o o ooo ooo o o oo 7 Warranty Information oooooccocococooo o 508 Washer Adding Fluid os icc oen 462 Washers Windshield 169 Washing Vehicle llle 478 Wheel and Wheel Trim 2 0 0 0 0 00040 480 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 480 Wind Bufteting i cian a xe ee ee ela 187 Window Fogging POWER sas pick ecm tat tess tay eid ey gai cal US Seas ar Sew al ee N 35 Windshield Defroster 00 0002 eae 100 Windshield Washers llle 167 Windshield Wiper Blades o o oo o o o 461 Windshield Wipers ssec RR eae os 167 Wiper Blade Replacement 461 Wipers Intermittent llle 169 532 INDEX M INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The
142. Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021410235 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Pan
143. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while t
144. accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop A STARTING AND OPERATING 323 NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might
145. ach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury cause
146. act spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire The LOW TIRE text message and the graphic with the low tire pres sure flashing will be displayed 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values A STARTING AND OPERATING 393 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h
147. added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration y nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to g
148. adio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent N 031409884 Map Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS owe The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Wipes Washer Control Lever 036407502 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent set
149. ain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power
150. ake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further mission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both information Using the wrong type of brake fluid the brake system and the clutch release system The two can severely damage your brake system and or systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one impair its performance The proper type of brake system will not affect the other system The manual fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the transmission clutch release system should not require original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the reservoir brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a Continued result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has the brake fluid Brake seal components could be been in a tightly closed container Keep the master damaged causing partial or complete brake failure cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake This could result in a collision fluid in a open containe
151. al USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compartment 044136844 USB AUX Connector Port Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod 9 contents a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either p
152. also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or l
153. amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce A STARTING AND OPERATING
154. and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 lbs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 371 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 372 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION j y 3 M shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of
155. and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following info
156. ant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one spec
157. ant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact o a LAG AD 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning
158. applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg 370 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only
159. are a high quality filter and are recom mended a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on
160. are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off position 045607536 the blower will shut off Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic Use
161. as Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passen ger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIR BAG are embossed on the air bag covers 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protecti
162. as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins 338 STARTING AND OPERATING HN to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low L Off Road with the 4WD
163. ased Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine off and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 322 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob or ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location
164. ast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five sec onds will allow the program format type to be selected 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a bu
165. at is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR 402 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your veh
166. ather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting and Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 314 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits Five Speed Manual Transmission quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING grounded three wire extensio
167. ation that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks an
168. ative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently press ing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the eng
169. ay es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN The radio uses the following limits for file s
170. ay it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are
171. bae UN 110 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 384 Mopar Paris oi ac m geom Ra T rara 451 MTBE ETBE 22221 9 9 e ERA DE 394 Multi Function Control Lever 162 New Vehicle Break In Peri0d 97 Occupant Restraints ooo o oo ooo oooooo 39 Occupant Restraints Sedan o o o o o 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 393 Odometer ica xd cb eee ee aes 221 Tip ies eins Hikes Baas dad ea eases 219 Oil Change Indicator 0000 230 Oil Change Indicator Reset 230 Oil Engine a kikou a Ras che atone 453 Capacity sica ia a ameet d 491 Change Interval oda a 454 Checking viciado a la aa 453 Inc 455 lg ETT 456 Filter Disposal ace hn ER ee d 455 Identification Logo ios vier Re Fn 454 Materials Added to 6 eee nirengi 455 Recommendation 000 000005 454 Synthetig deeds siccae e e deco va 455 VISCOSIL dues e QE VR aka A ee d 455 Oil Filter Selection llle 456 Onboard Diagnostic SysteM ooooooooo o 449 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 175 Operating Precautions eese 449 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine oooooooooooooo ooo 218 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 Paint Care oes iia a eed da ad 478 Panic Alaris s escaso eee eret Ee 24 A INDEX 525 Parking
172. battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws located on the radiator support Air Intake Finger Screws 060809464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or Positive Battery Post sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK manual transmission to NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this NOTE Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this could establish a ground connection and perso
173. braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The 352 STARTING AND OPERATING HN system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and
174. can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the EvRbutton while the system is listing the message and say Send 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or 11 See You in 15 minutes number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 Lam on my way List of Preset Messages 13 TIl be late Yes No 14 Are you there yet 15 Where are we meeting Where are you 16 Can this wait I need more direction 1 2 3 4 17 Bye for now SLOL 6 7 8 9 18 When can we meet Why 19 Send number to call I love you 20 Start without me Call me Call me later 10 Thanks a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After swit
175. card located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Bee d ib determining when your tires should be spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck 380 STARTING AND OPERATING 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to replacement tires in this section for further informa tion Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven e Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation
176. cation of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or
177. child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR
178. ching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Voice Tree Phonebook phonebook List Names Entries Listed one Enter Location Entry Deleted 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup ps E 7 LE og EZ Te emm mm Announcement m NN ete List Pnones nee Selecta language English Espanol Prompts pin code Phones e i to be deleted or Francais Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1
179. chorage 48 B DOOR LOCKS pecugarrca te ee rv edie tees 29 Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Manal Door dE NER 29 Instructions ias ies edic Goes as og ed 49 eee AVG nts ect aces caecseenc 31 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 52 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 53 A v9 PH ere OE eb EP 34 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped a2 rhe ERN HEU HER ed 54 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Pretensioners 55 Event Data Recorder EDR 75 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 55 Child Restraints esce terr Ree Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS CSET cheek Rae SESE Ree 59 MP SAFETY TIPS Losses eene er cove aC DER MENGE errors tees i sanne Transporting Passengers ss stireria tai 98 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 61 DO y rr ias da 98 oi ondaa oo ip Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The NVehiGle cupra ohne em tee pe 99 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 63 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 68 The Vehicle c i4 4 3404 2 eR x Ga ed doe ale 102 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authori
180. cing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light TH this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not o
181. cing the pressure A STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident then you should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy con stant throttle and apply more power
182. ck in the belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HN 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position 022607727 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher positi
183. cle ace seen S Ret eh 400 Capacities 6cti dat aed Vedi eoe RE e ad 402 TIPOS Cr 368 og ER 29 Automatic Door 2 6 eee 32 Child Protection icem e Re ias as 34 Do aaa a E don o a 29 Power DOOF e xe uiie ai od emque sede 31 Lubrication Body ooooooooooooooo ooo 461 Luggage Rack Roof Rack o 204 Lumbar Support 2 6 0 6 eee 152 Maintenance Free Battery o 457 Maintenance Procedures 0000005 452 Maintenance Schedule sss eek ew eee os 496 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 223 Manual Service 0 0 ce es 510 Manual Transaxle Fluid Level Check o ooooo ooo o 477 Lubricant Selection o o o o oooooo o oo o 477 Manual Transmission esses eimig esed ereget ga 314 Fluid Level Check o o oooooo o o 476 Frequency of Fluid Change ooo o o o o 476 Lubricant Selection o oooooo o oo 476 Map Reading LightS scaire nta rini Oremut a 166 Master Cylinder Brakes 471 Metan l esr enerne do bees RETRO 394 Mini Trip Computer 2 0 0 0 0 0 000000 225 MifXOIS gcc a2 oe St oe RE ORE ee RO ex dus 107 Automatic Dimming lees 107 Electric Powered 2 2 llle 109 Exterior Folding 2a cia 109 liu vc aA a ee rE 110 Ouid e ace Reh eae et ne rade e ecu 108 REARVICW cour Re E Resins Rick Ere dr Seay ek ER uas 107 524 INDEX IN VANITY oa cse acies 9 9 ark eet 9 EPA e
184. clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmis sion cools down During very cold temperatures 4 F 20 C or below transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmis sion temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A STARTING AND OPERATING 325 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the p
185. control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine off and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob or ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFT posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT
186. croll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer p
187. ction press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Display Units In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ENGLISH or METRIC appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibra
188. cts In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE text message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 390 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 81826bed Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the LOW TIRE text message will no longer be displayed the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault
189. d low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Voice Text Reply Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the w button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message e You
190. d multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Continued 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION Continued e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD y Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not pl
191. d restraint to move the head restraint away from your head UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable EIL DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907833 of a collision and could result in serious injury or Active Head Restraint Tilted Position death NOTE Continued The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued Folding Rear Seat Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to fold the rear seatback flat tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head
192. d by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued WARNING Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too
193. de air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
194. der warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion ram To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel 396 STARTING AND OPERATING HN MMT In Gasoline MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline
195. djustment Automatic Temperature Control You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply Automatic Operation allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the Operation of the system is quite simple s F 1 P system completely and closes the outside air intake 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for auto matic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there
196. do not work properly FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN identifies each component may be printed on the inside Cavity Car Mini Description of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Main tridge Fuse taining Your Vehicle for further information Fuse a 1 Empty Empty 15 Amp AWD 4WD Control Lt Blue Module If Equipped 3 10 Amp Rear Center Brake Red Light Switch 4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Red Occupant Classifica tion Module 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow If 072739988 Yellow Equipped EE 6 10 Amp Power Mirror Integrated Power Module Red Steering Control Satel lite Radio Hands Free Phone a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 7 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw 14 10 Amp Instrument Cluster Green Red 8 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw 15 40 Amp Radiator Fan Green Green 9 40 Amp Power Seats 16 15 Amp Dome Lamp Green Lt Blue Sunroof Rear Wiper 10 20 Amp Power Locks Interior Motor Yellow Lighting 17 10 Amp Wireless Control 11 15 Amp Power Outlet Red Module Lt Blue 18 40 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay 12 20 Amp 115V AC Inverter If Green Yellow Equipped 19
197. dometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display OOK ccs pee Geo a EN UU ded des Door Ajar PATE bey eke Pace dor Prett ispa Gate Ajar gASCAP sce bode bie ea s Fuel Cap Fault LOW rE coss aneu RR aes Low Tire Pressure CHANgE OIL Oil Change Required NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster warnings such as Door Ajar and Gate Ajar will be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center If Equipped 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message w
198. e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II e e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a ch
199. e CN ceo q e S FIS BSS EJ NIFE N ZIRIS a LB Change the manual transmission fluid if using your S vehicle for any of the following trailer towing C heavy loading taxi police delivery service com X X X H mercial service off road desert operation or more E than 50 of your driving is at sustained high D speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C h Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X E The spark plug change interval is mileage based only 8 yearly intervals do not apply 502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS E SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE 2 0 0 69 case ase MR aks 505 Impaired TDD TTY 000 507 Prepare For The Appointment 505 Service Contract ae e Ee ee Ree 507 Prepare A List sse cope a RR 505 Mi WARRANTY INFORMATI
200. e System aaa nes c p coe oeste 347 Anti Lock ABS eesis oo temaet 348 Master Cylinder parasas apre e Ra Rad 471 Parking ie cte doshas ss Pood tee E Sareea ee 344 Warning Light oces acra obese seen 215 Brake Transmission Interlock 319 Bulb Replacement 0 0 0 0 e e eee eee 488 Bulbs Light ER ees 102 Calibration Compass i aeit es 237 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 491 Capacities Fluide seat g ERR KOS med gs 491 Caps Filler Fuels oceano tren oe ee ea 398 Oil Engine crs see me te eae eee Raa 447 Power Steering ina 6 oe a edm ee ee al 343 Radiator Coolant Pressure 468 Carbon Monoxide Warning 04 98 Cargo Area Cover 1 6 eee 197 Cargo Area Features cs acne ae oor einai a 196 Cargo Compartment 000000000 196 G oa actos ites eth pe dice sollte Em 196 10 Luggage Cartier ss iugi em eme es 204 Cargo Light Sc oec ret reor ios e Gea a 196 Cargo Load PloOt moi Beebo ade ee RE 199 Cargo lie Downs o csi cikasto patacs a saiia aas 200 Car Washes se a one oa ibea Rie Ea 478 Cellular Phone stone esca a Re 111 Center High Mounted Stop Light 490 Chains Tite i iiia a Galea bag 382 Changing A Flat Tire o o o o o ooo ooo ooo 422 Chart Dire Sizing xeu e eX ee 363 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 450 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 98 Checks Safety Sestao roe es 98 C
201. e abrasive or strong cleaning materials e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar such as steel wool or scouring powder that will cause that destroys the paint and protective coating scratch metal and painted surfaces have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of can result in damage or removal of paint and decals the owner 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN e e e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR
202. e carefully two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual Sopfeo contains a complete listing of all subjects Rollover Warning Label Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing 6 INTRODUCTION jm i A CEL ti ig elo 3 g 3 z Q UNCTI i 5 95 i916 E ca J 1 1 LI Ch TS HDs tolo Er 3 pd i E Tol E el BOE ARBAO ANO WASHER E RIRBRG ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPERATURE RESTRANNT SYSTEM ADJUSTABLE LECTRONI PEDALS SPEED C I a H e TIRE PRESSURE WILL OESCENT MONITOR CONTROL AWD ELECTRO ALL WHEEL BILITY CONTROL ont A 4WD 2 THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL CONTROL DRIVE ws voct R
203. e chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit you authorized dealer immediately to have the fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an im proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle However if the vehicle is frequently driven on rough or unpaved roads on mountain roads on short trips or in heavy city traffic during hot weather or is used for frequent trailer towing police fleet taxi etc change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is
204. e doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s and front passenger s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key 1 Unlock Driver Power Door Lock Switch 2 Lock 021806187 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Auto Lock Doors If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled
205. e irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller System serviced as well Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2 could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
206. e much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking perfor mance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have a colli sion Have the vehicle checked immediately 348 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Anti Lock Brake System ABS WARNING Continued The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those performance under most braking conditions The system resulting from excessive speed in turns following automatically pumps t
207. e next generation of child safety 022668173 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicles LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether This Vehicle anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 022668566 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat ing position e it Top Tether Anchorage Symbol a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the com bined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child re straint Can a child seat be installed in the cen ter position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Yes You can install child re
208. e operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M
209. e parking lights Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on the headlights 031407548 Headlight Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ul 031407550 Front Fog Light Operation NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights y Turn Signal Operation 031407551 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or t
210. e reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired whichever come first If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic syste
211. e slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder b
212. e toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at www siriusxm ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due t
213. ease the lumbar support 030907660 030940023 Seat Height Adjustment Lever Lumbar Adjustment Lever a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Driver s Seatback Recline WARNING To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired angle and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion N L Fold Flat Seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Fold Flat Lever impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head r
214. ebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the ke button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phoneboo
215. ecessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remai
216. eed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions 416 STARTING AND OPERATING HN City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow None e Transmission in NOT ALLOWED NEUTRAL e Key in ACC Position Dolly Tow Front OK FWD Only OK FWD Only Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer All OK OK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal Sel EN highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain position will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
217. eet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 514 INDEX IN ABS Anti Lock Brake SysteM 348 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 467 Adding Fuels 26er RR pA Rs 398 Adding Washer Fluid ooooooooooooo 462 Additives E el 4 ard e BES A ns 396 PUD AC p Male ae Gisele ES 61 Airbag Deployment s sss ticcema tengd eg 0000 72 Airbag Light en 69 Airbag Maintenance llle 73 Airbag Side iia e teg uerba e PMS oss 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 65 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 456 Air Conditioner Maintenance 458 Air Conditioning 0 0 0 0 660 e ee ee ee 294 Air Conditioning ControlS o oo oo oo 294 Air Conditioning Filter o oooooooo o 305 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 306 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 458 Air Conditioning SysteM o o o o ooo 294 Air Pressure Tires llle 373 Alarm Light idea eese e E eaae dne rs 217 Alarm System Security A
218. efore writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audi
219. eft side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type ih aa No program type or None undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Program Type ie Program Type ee Information Inform Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Jazz Jazz Sports Sports News News Talk Talk Nostalgia Nostalga Top 40 Top 40 Oldies Oldies Weather Weather Femonaliy POS By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Public Public is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Rhythm and Blues R amp B station with the same selected Music Type name The Religious Music Rel Musc Music Type function
220. el for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button A N Release both buttons at the same time U Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate
221. el Musc mode 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM Thi
222. elt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly re strained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce t
223. elt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Children Too Large for Child Re straints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e Never place
224. emind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert amp warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler
225. en filling or working around the washer solution a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION The catalytic converter
226. enefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that open may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner Do not us
227. environment Contact your authorized dealer service 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters
228. eplace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 382 STARTING AND OPERATING HI WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use el km Be with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices capacity other than what was originally equipped are not recommended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different
229. equiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Par tial Off mode the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ECS system is reduced Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ES
230. er outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the 12 Volt Power Outlet fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Continued Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in Power Outlet Fuse Location use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or To avoid serious injury or death prevent the engine from starting 034636797 Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued Continued 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION Continued Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution After the use of high p
231. er protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC air bags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 4 1922610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection 022607729 WARNING Side Curtain Air Bag Label Location NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners enough to block the location of the SABIC The and or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the area where the side curtain air bag is located vehicle may deploy should remain free from any obstructions Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects betwee
232. erties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 395 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered un
233. ess the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display
234. estraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM em 030907490 022607494 Push Button Active Head Restraint Normal Position For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the hea
235. etermine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 342 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision
236. ether Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed at Positioning Lap Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any sla
237. ever drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch 316 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lu bricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmis sion Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine Accel 1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 Size era tion Rate All Accel 14 23 29 45 72 En 23 37 47 gines Cruise 12 18 25 32 52 19 29 40 Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed i e not released To maintain a safe speed and prolong bra
238. evices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Press the PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bott
239. for those tires Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exis
240. fter the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 508 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain
241. gs also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Si
242. h the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transmission oil may become too hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn If this happens the transmission overheat in off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops dicator light wil
243. hains o o o ooo 382 Snow TES gt Visor 92e a 376 A Sa ea ede qd dob ou tee 377 Speed Control Cruise Control 171 Speedometer rnirar sAn ae WAGE hao eh ae ES 213 Starin ody ae Bisel g assa ee wea aes Pu on e aus d Rs 311 Automatic Transmission 312 Cold Weather llle 313 Engine Fails to Start o o o o o o o 313 Manual Transmission 0000 00 eee 311 REMOTE ect LITT cies avn Sa hes Su ate Sa SE 26 528 INDEX IN Starting Procedures 1 samaa aca iga 311 Steering POWE visitar a iwesa ams 343 Tilt COMMU 4 once Mie on eaten eae aoa 170 DLOTARE aee ied ease eae dd 487 Storage DITE iu direc redeas RT der Shade esas 193 Storage Vehicle 4 teco pi mistag e ae PER RE ra 304 Stuck Freeing icc sse e rm ae 438 Sun ROO e c a cave aye a a DRE ERU IU err 184 Sun Visor Extension oooooooooooooooo 110 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 61 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 1 eee 455 System Remote Starting 000 26 Tachometer ions eR eee mee waa 215 Taillights 3 sie or RR RR 490 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 298 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 218 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo oooocoooooo ooo 200 Tilt Steering Column llle 170 Tire and Loading Information Placard 36
244. he LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Con ditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera tures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures T 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX AIC For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by ro tating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is se lected the system will maintain 045638695 that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will 045640031 automatically make the a
245. he brakes during severe braking another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning conditions to prevent wheel lock up The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must Ma never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish the safety of others their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just The ABS Warning Light monitors the ABS press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to s System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds slow down or stop e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or cu iia the traction afforded brake system is not functioning and that service is If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 349 required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on whe
246. he rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door I 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 021806189 i Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are en gaged THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature 36 THINGS TO KNOW
247. he risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occup
248. he socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Pull the bulb from the socket Rear Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stoplamp 1 Raise the liftgate This light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 2 Remove the two push pins from the taillamp housing 3 Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the light from the aperture panel 4 Twist and remove socket from the light 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters API Certified Cooling System 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor
249. he total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 410 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brake
250. he vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol
251. hear a click abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac storage insert the regular latch plate into the black tor will withdraw any slack in the belt button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If neces sary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate te m d AMA 022610239 grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter th
252. heel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Road Wheel 3 Wheel Lug Nut 432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped 5 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased lug nuts leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight ness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ibs 135 Nem If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 6 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack seated against the wheel nea Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in
253. hen the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity A STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Pla
254. her designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake taining Your Vehicle for further information fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended br
255. her strap anchorages di behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach ments in the center seating position Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions Child restraints with flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments can be installed in any rear seating position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints next to each other you must use the seat belt for the center position You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical in stallation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restrai
256. here is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 20 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Instrument Panel Dimming Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and r
257. hers ooooo ooo oo 169 Programming A Rolling Code Mist Feature scc ccce e re Pe ar ha ss 170 Programming A Non Rolling Code M TILT STEERING COLUMN 170 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 180 E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL Using HomeLink 00 182 EROS Pe ARES qtia qq ida ege ih DCCUNILY 44 s bru s PU Ru A eds 182 To Activate uice oce dox eee ee Hata ao 172 Troubleshooting Tips ccce 182 les die rf ne General Information o o oooooooo 183 To Deactivate sesers RR eb da 173 E POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 184 M RE idi Opening Sunroof Express 185 TO Naty The E C E i Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 185 106 Closing Sunroof Express Closing Sunroof Manual Mode Pinch Protect Feature Venting Sunroof Express Sunshade Operation 00 Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Ignition Off Operation ll ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ll POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED CUPHOLDERS 90 0 3345990 te eee RAS ill STORAGE Glove Compartment And Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IS Door Storage esce e e y e en 194 B CONSOLE FEATURES 52x I Rh 195 E CARGO AREA FEATURES i333 der bean e 196 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight ictus eR ERR
258. hild Restraint llle 76 Child Safety Locks o ooooooomoooooomo 34 Clean Air Gasoline o o o o oo oo ooo ooo 394 Cleaning A cede ested edb ew ae aa REC d 480 Climate Control seda t peer EE oes 294 Cloak 5 ach ete na e Senta he Roe tex 240 Clica attack Rea de eg ule aes an ag Ui bct nad 471 Clutch Fluid esi foci eet Rr 471 Coin Holder cesse Saas ange ete 195 Cold Weather Operation oooooooo ooo o 313 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 293 Compact Spare Tiere sese oTi Gaunasi mis toire 377 COMPASS ous vios eee doo Tex ns dana 225 Compass Calibrati0N o o ooooooo o o 237 Compass Variance 6 6 eee 237 Connector A eee wes oboe eeu ed 285 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 285 Consoles ic i aes ke e Ree nt 195 Contract Services amd ek RU 507 Coolant Antifreeze o oo oooooooooo oo 491 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 468 Cooling System s ose sehe ee d RE d 465 Adding Coolant Antifreeze A INDEX 517 Goolant Level 3 4 sama Sane cte eir tae 466 Disposal of Used Coolant 469 Drain Flush and Refill 466 INSPECHON uc acer enl Rs Roe Rs eee WES 469 Points to Remember sess 470 Pressure Cap eder ath atin galas dad 468 Radiator Cap conri oia tees od 468 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 466 Corrosion Protection 2 0 0 0 0 ooo 478 Cruise Light
259. his feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your sele
260. i 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high es STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it mee
261. ible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are 344 STARTING AND OPERATING HN apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE
262. icle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing A STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire
263. id Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum b
264. ide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the b
265. ified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of
266. ild seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats
267. ile Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the w button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the de but ton Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the ke button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect amp Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect amp Phone either until the call ends or a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the the call on the Uconnect Phone and
268. ill appear the next time the vehicle is started LoW tirE When tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles CHANgE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer display for approxi mately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the sched uled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 24 OFF ROAD Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 4WD lock switch is activated and the shift lever is in
269. ill turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position eENING NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is IE you opu operating the vehicle when the applied It does not show the degree of brake application Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi an j nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light contact with hot engine or exhaust components and G This light indicates that the transmission fluid cause a fire temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop them This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle i
270. ine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of trans mission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be mission shifting occurring moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever
271. ing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In 1 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both but
272. ing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the ignition key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal A STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped wi
273. interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On A STARTING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to d
274. ion when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in WARNING Bion e When working near the radiator cooling fan e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition vehicle switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires switch is in the ON position disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cu
275. is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres sor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Header Lamp T578 Center Dome Lamp T578 Rear Cargo Lamp 8 A35LFAA Flashlight Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp H11 Premium Low Beam HIR2 Headlamp High Beam Headlamp 9005 Premium High Beam HIR2 Headlamp Daytime Running Light 3157K DRL Front Park Turn Signal 7444NA Lamp Front Side Marker Lamp 194 Front Fog Lamp HILL Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Assembly
276. k Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile phone s SIM card phonebook is downloaded This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e e Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entrie
277. k area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E MIRRORS oaaao 107 W Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED 11 EJ Inside Day Night Mirror 107 Operation sara eae P ex e Peor s 113 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 107 Phone Call Features o o o ooooooo 120 Outside Mirror Driver Side 108 Uconnect Phone Features 123 Outside Mirror Passenger Side 108 Advanced Phone Connectivity 128 Folding Outside Mirrors 109 Things You Should Know About Your Power Mirrors 32 dake Sad hava acts eae 109 OMA ROME Ss a ane ur es Seat ae Heated Mirrors If Equipped 110 O General Information 4 140 O Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 110 VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED enis ea Sun Visor Sliding Feature 110 Noleg Command a quist sant t 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In
278. ka Coe PR eS Flag Brakes repara eed d e bea wd 493 Clean AE ei reae e dede Sale hE SEE Fluid Capacities i eda dr era nemen 491 Ethanol a sa ih pee des are ake eae AUR dada Fluid Eeakse 5 sese e e head Ro 102 Filler Cap Gas Cap Fluid Level Checks Gasoline sos ottenere a dni oem eh Automatic Transmission oooooooooo 475 GAUSS ec oie ean sah ch tia ee Gh Ste ded Ron Cooling System llle 466 MASI as Mao s ovum Het e eA dog Hands ties ds Power Steering e regars einet E aAA E 343 Materials Added 0 0 0 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 492 Methanol 4 523 c ad EGER REX Fog Lights site aes emm ec Ree C E eee 163 Octane Rabng cores anna ta pa eer us Folding Rear Seats crasso negdo aai s 158 Requirements 6 6 0 eee eee Folding Rear Seat Sedan 00 158 TankCapacity llle eee Four Wheel Drive 0 000000000004 333 Fueling s e RR RR Ra SYSTEMS PD ane ad woe aan EE 333 Fuel System Caution seanda mannens ama Four Wheel Drive Operation 393 PUSCS 3 2543 se e sce e ESA Ee oq cedo d Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 438 520 INDEX IA Garage Door Opener HomeLink 175 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 398 Gasoline Clean Air oooooo oo o 394 Gasoline Fuel ooo EROR 393 Gasoline Reformulated 394 Gauges Coolant Temperatures ssis cs cas stressas as 218 Euel
279. ke life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK 318 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine off and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Allow
280. ks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not 24 22 05 16 supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks a
281. ks on that disc A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency KHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 WMA Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps WMA 44 1 and 48 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium
282. l ing with the pedals or the ability to control the and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle vehicle control e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top If required mounting posts must be properly in of already installed floor mats Additional floor stalled if not equipped from the factory mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or pedal area and interfere with the pedals mounting can cause interference with the brake Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have control of the vehicle been removed for cleaning Continued 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Chec
283. l HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash follow these steps rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two out
284. l as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place 060600626 Removing Jack Handle From Jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange assembly The rear location is the same but with two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Front Jacking Location 060572356 mm 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 060572357 Rear Jacking Location 3
285. l come on and the vehicle will back into the normal range If the pointer remains on slow slightly until the automatic transmission the H red mark for more than a minute turn the cools down enough to allow a return to the engine off immediately and call for service requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating may reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion WARNING 6 You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack shou
286. larm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 256 Antifreeze Engine Coolant o o o 466 Capacities i5 s pesa pedir S mia Eg ch ed 491 Disposal cc sso diosa eu duros E 469 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 348 Anti Lock Warning Light ooooo oo 214 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Caress oh eae a Y e d 478 Assistance TOWiN8 irs as a patia eei FONA RA hoa NA 124 Automatic Dimming Mirror 107 Automatic Door Locks o o o o oooooo o 32 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 298 Automatic Transaxle o o o oo ooooooo o 12 Overheating 6 4 versos CR e Rea ala 421 Automatic Transmission elles 317 en INDEX 515 Fluid and Filter Changes o o o o o 476 Fluid Level Check i ommmssiosenaa re 475 Fluid Type tite dica a kd reeled e 473 Gear Ranges s aci iden mens a cats d ca 320 Special Additives sese EE TR ra 475 a ieee inda decas dede Tee dere act dase 331 o iu i seme ees aged Un deed s 457 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Seat i sss s Regg y GOR GM eae 99 Body Mechanism Lubrication 461 B Pilla Location llle 368 Brake Assist System oo ooooooo ooo oo 351 Brake Fluid utes Ree eere 493 Brake Parking ooooooooooooooooooo ooo 344 Brak S ase em a n s areae 347 Brak
287. ld not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the cargo area WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 060673171 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher mm Spare Tire And Jack Stowage E 8 3 Set the parking brake Spare Tire Stowage 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor ie PSSE or REVERSE manual transmission in the cargo area Spare Tire Removal 5 Turn OFF the ignition Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Block both the front and rear of the WARNING Continued wheel diagonally opposite the jack ing position For example if chang Always park on a firm level surface as far from the ing the right front tire block the left edge of the roadway as possible before raising the rear wheel vehicle ee e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to NOTE
288. le Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows A wo N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
289. le 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone Can the child sit all the way back against the back of ER the vehicle seat infant or child restraint It could come loose in a 1 collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt f MA f child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In child is usi
290. lease the COMPASS button to exit 10 6 7 8 9 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON Uconnect 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK 042040029 Uconnect 230 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turn ing the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for fi
291. limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio trac
292. lity of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
293. ll files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Ucon
294. ll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 510 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
295. ll show EJECTING DISC when the disc is INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restric
296. ll types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045607535 Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control 045607539 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating 045607540 right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose f
297. llow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 398 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 056800424 The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure Fuel Filler Cap the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface A STARTING AND OPERATING 399 CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is
298. longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 388 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
299. lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause Continued CAUTION Continued severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second third and fourth gears direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift 324 STARTING AND OPERATING HN control refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the transmission controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter
300. ly be made while playing a DVD e Power Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Lock Locks out rear remote controls if equipped e CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to s
301. m malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light w
302. mber ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects
303. n cord You or others could be injured if you leave the The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one vehicle unattended without having the parking hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine brake fully applied The parking brake should al ENE ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Remember to disconnect the engine block heater Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear STARTING AND OPERATING 315 CAUTION e Launching in any gear except Ist gear will result in excessive slipping of the clutch and potentially lugging or stalling the engine Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended N
304. n on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer e ry Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob secured to prevent them from moving and interfer jects can become trapped under the brake peda
305. n the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock mode the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves brake pedal pulsations aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 350 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss
306. n the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 8 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Release the parking brake Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 9 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431 10 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover Tire And W
307. n you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air ba
308. nal Jump Starting procedure injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the Jump Starting Procedure positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex negative post of the booster battery plosion a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the neg
309. nds Satellite Radio e Track to change the track To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite e Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Memo Mode USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track Play to play a Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the following commands e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e List to list an Artist Playlist Album Track etc To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos
310. nds Play will begin at the start of track 1 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD A Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time displ
311. nect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 042340030 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turn ing the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Y
312. ng during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 e low road noise smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect amp Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle spee
313. ng feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VR button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training com mand You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e Press the Ne button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to e provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e e Make sure that no one other than you is speaki
314. ng security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema 2o tu
315. ng the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or behind their back Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use any attachment method shown with an X Below LATCH Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Child Child LATER Lower Anchors Seat Belt Top Restraint Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor Restraint System age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH 2 equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages Anchor Tether located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the BN 9 seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the Cn seating position These anchorages are used to install Th
316. ning a safe vehicle speed Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 356 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cente
317. nk Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect web site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the ke button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven with one being want to call the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number connected to yo
318. no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors ON The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle 392 STARTING AND OPERATING HN position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the comp
319. ns hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or brak ing In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 When To Use Low L Off Road With The 4WD Lock Lever Engaged When driving off road shift into low L Off Road and activate the 4WD LOCK This will provide additional traction and activates the numerous off road features to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the sustained lower gearing low L Off Road with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range
320. nt manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here pE X A ae To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit 4 5 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the
321. ntrol giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations OPERATION When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmis sion will operate automatically shifting between the six available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is dis played in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear 332 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should ma
322. ntry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is com plete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost ke
323. nu ally select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade A STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal rele
324. nual Transmission If Equipped 311 Recommended Shift SpeedsS 316 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 312 Downshifting nesese angraga e naneyi Normal Starting 6 0 0 drga kega 312 M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF Bares Cold sti EOQUIPPED 5 urere IRR uem eR ES Below 20 F Or 29 C 313 Key Ignition Park Interlock 319 If Engine Fails To Start 313 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 319 O After Starting css aee ve ede eda 313 O Six Speed Automatic Transmission E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 314 It Equipped isse earn Ries 319 Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission xus ee ire CVD 1f Equipped ioo rer nh ens 326 308 STARTING AND OPERATING HN B AUTOSTICK 0 0 0 eee eee 331 M PARKING BRAKE 004 344 OPERATION 3 4 24 04 244044 taba ad 331 ME BRAKESYSTEM 000005 347 ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF Anti Lock Brake System ABS 348 EQUIPPED cio 204400444 F OX Eda hs 333 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 350 ll ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS o 333 Anti Lock Brake System ABS s 350 OA DEDING TIUS er dy id Traction Control System TCS 351 D T ERU d ua e Brake Assist System BAS sess 351 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand
325. nually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the instru ment cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand four wheel drive AWD 051906185 Four Wheel Drive Switch Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK swi
326. ny DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc SAT is loading and READING DISC when the radio is The radio may shut down during extremely hot reading the disc conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal The use of other sized discs may damage the CD components player mechanism NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC cel Butlon Heding Compact Dise s position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disel Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the a with the corresponding number 1 6 where the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being CD was loaded and the disc will unload and loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays display wi
327. o is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Nu
328. o one of the following reasons The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF F
329. o so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE VERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are 340 STARTING AND OPERATING HN designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some thing goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the transaxle transfer case engine or vehicle
330. o the memo recorder Main Menu Radio AM Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the this mode you may say the following commands PU MEL Frequency to change the frequency In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Radio FM e To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In e this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Mode e MEI Radio o svito kote tadio menn To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following comma
331. oing to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
332. ol buttons Uconnect Phone Se button and Voice Command va button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain ope
333. olant conforming to MS 12106 by an coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows authorized dealer as soon as possible extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant anti freeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles Continued 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine cool
334. om of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD
335. on When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI ig Uu Y f B Mini Latch Stowage Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini seat latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head Side restraint 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your Connecting Mini Latch To Buckle plate into the buckle until you
336. on for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e e e Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC aa e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you
337. ondition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear
338. only operates when in the FM Religious Talk Rel Talk mode Rock Rock If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Soft Soft Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Soft Rock Soft Rck exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IP SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e gt II DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail able on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can on
339. oo ooo o 107 Instrument Cluster o ooooooooo o oo 212 Instrument Panel and ControlS 210 Instrument Panel Cover o o oo ooo 482 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 483 Integrated Power Module Fuses 483 Interior Appearance Care oooooooooo oo nisi 481 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 169 IitHOdUCHON 24 00 aa o eee 4 Jacking Instructions asa eee kac dt erant dern 424 Jack Location acere e e ad cad 422 Jack Op ration casi dere d REY Rd 422 Jump Starting sies 3e b dedi ed ed 433 Key In Reminder i esser Ege x E EE 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan 0 20 Key Programming lt s 2645 esae rra eae 17 Key Replacement 2 6 0 06 eee 16 KEYS x ix cue heh aR As eee ee eee SCIT 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer oooooooooo o 15 Knee Bolstet s scs Ru xri deese 61 Lane Change and Turn SignalS 490 Lane Change Assist llle 165 Lap Shoulder Belts ooooooommo ooo 43 LatcheS sisi e a 102 Hood EE 160 Lead Free Gasoline ze re 393 L aks Fluid iia ue RE due EE GR ues 102 522 INDEX IN Life Of Tires ia d arem al oem aw 380 Liftgate Sedan s eus eh cem e a a 37 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 202 Eight Bulbs gene eee ee Ban yd One e 102 Lights 422 Rer eR HELE ea Cris 102 AMA it eue e oor eR TER eed 69 AAI sas e dex heh Roe PU des 217 Anto Locks ep tane elaine ds 214
340. operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Ot
341. or approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the
342. or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button Following the beep say Mute 128 UNDERSTAND
343. ore frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic transmission fluid is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as th
344. ore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the e but ton until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the w button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EvRbutton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call Wh
345. our Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio pr
346. out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Y 021806186 Manual Door Lock Knob 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children a child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicl
347. ow ever if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur while in this range use the AutoStick shift control if equipped to select a lower gear ratio ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 NOTE Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans mission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals AutoStick If Equipped When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising sp
348. ower draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually unplug the device and plug it in again To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 WARNING Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when
349. perate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 7 Air Bag Warning Light O t This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driv ing have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 9 High Beam Indicator Z This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to
350. perating modes for four wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two wheel drive equipped vehicles Full On Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illumi nated All other stability features of ESC function nor mally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of Operation A STARTING AND OPERATING 359 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion r
351. r EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal if equipped 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was com pleted properly the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel
352. r absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may CAUTION cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may dam age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func tion and the ability to shift the transmission Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also mm damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Automatic Transmission 6 speed If Equipped taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Selection Of Lubricant 6 Speed Transmission It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and will require m
353. r seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed c
354. r seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Seat Switch a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH
355. r selectable User selectable air delivery point other than 1o any air outside or AJC on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature Not allowed in knobs for comfort Defrost Mode Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other 1o any speed to any air outside or A C on or off than Auto Set mode delivery point recirculated knob to any desired air Not allowed in delivery point other than Defrost Mode Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort 045663216 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed thro
356. race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 330 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies
357. rations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the Ne button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Li
358. rculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured CS lation However pressing the Recirculation interior air to condense on windows and hamper Control button will put the system in recircu visibility For this reason the system will not allow lation mode This can be used when outside Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity Attempting to use the recirculation while in these are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink the control button to illuminate and then turn off 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Bi Level Mix or Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibi
359. rect SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPARO Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane aaa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission CVT If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR CVTF 4 Continu ously Variable Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission 6 speed If Equipped We recommend you use SK Energy ATF SP 4 Transmis sion Fluid Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Drive Assembly RDA We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubri cant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 Power Transfer Unit PTU We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubri cant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 496 Maintenance Chart M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTEN
360. red during a crash investigation 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana
361. referred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and ma
362. rely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode f your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 Any engine warning lamps come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved
363. ress the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button e A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e e e Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in
364. rized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the first detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle e If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use e The grab handles on the back of the
365. rmal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II SAFETY TIPS WARNING Continued Transporting Passengers Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO using a seat belt properly AREA Exhaust Gas WARNIAG WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 1 Sq e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Continued If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is n
366. rmation e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs a
367. roblem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnos tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 326 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited at very cold temperatures Because the engine speed is higher when the torque conve
368. rom sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor wf Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side win dow demist outlets e Mix D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost GV Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side windo
369. rter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal The torque converter clutch will function normally once the trans mission is sufficiently warm Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission CVT If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis sion CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and LOW shift positions Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower available ratio based on vehicle speed Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially
370. s To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mist Feature Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031507504 Mist Operation TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt steering column lever is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
371. s Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call th
372. s 12 To Disarm The SysteM o oooooooo 19 Locking Doors With A Key o o 14 Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override 20 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE M SENTRY KEY ooooooooococmcoco oo 15 AA eget eae EERE 20 Replacement Keys cies eine 16 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 os ga o ENE General Information 00 18 Illuminated Approach If Equipped 22 ee ON Eee dedi To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 To Arm The System resep aaien era aiina 18 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 22 M POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED 35 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 23 Power Window Switches ooo 35 Using The Panic Alarm o oooooooo 24 AUO DOWN x cede RO awda n A RS 36 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 Window Lockout Switch 37 General Information 004 24 Bl LIFTGATE oss ee cae ei heed aw bias 37 Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 Mi OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 0 0 39 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 26 Lap Shoulder Belts o 43 How To Use Remote Start o 26 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt An
373. s axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued a STARTING AND OPERATING 411 WARNING Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage ratings are not exceeded before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the 1 GVWR proper inspection procedure 2 GTW e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor 3 GAWR mation in Starting and Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Towing Requirements Tires GVWR and GAWR limits 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized e Do not attempt to
374. s allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seco
375. s cannot be deleted or edited Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the Ne button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List e After the Ready prompt and the
376. s disarmed The light will also CAUTION turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 17 Temperature Gauge WARNING The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range System Pressure Cap paragraph CAUTION 18 Cruise Indicator If Equipped Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage CRUISE This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull Control System is ON over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air 19 4Wp Indicator Light condi
377. s equipped with a screw proved by the party responsible for compliance could remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons void the user s authority to operate the equipment facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the y 509p qup 8 i pry If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal Bon OAE REE ere apart Was sute 2 nes helos conditons not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement F The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 109 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Separating Case Halves 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaini
378. s on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 512 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must m
379. se safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 034206938 The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead Power Sunroof Switch console a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten you
380. se the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed view To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button erase the channels while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds unti
381. see e a Re Ras 218 Cupholders s ga qain pan pren eee 195 Customer Assistance 0 0 0 0 ee ee eee 505 Data Recorder Event 0 000 eee eae 75 Dealer Service o oo ooo ooo ooo o os 451 Defroster Rear Window 203 Defroster Windshield 100 Delay Intermittent Wipers llle 169 Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Switch Headlight 165 Dipsticks Power Steering 542g o ER o da aoa E 343 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 469 Door SOCKS i soiree Vans E do a 29 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 32 Door Opener Garage 2 6 ee 175 Downshifting ssia gan mia deea ee 316 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 153 DIVAN n PLE 333 Off Pavement l l 334 Off Road x ned paced RR SE GNOME ee 334 Electrical Power Outlets 187 Electric Remote MirTOrS o o 109 Electronic Brake Control SysteM 350 Anti Lock Brake System 350 Brake Assist System 518 INDEX IN Electronic Roll Mitigation s 352 Traction Control System ssd asira lille 351 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 171 Electronic Stability Control ESC 357 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 227 Emergency In Case of Jacking 33 1 ke ER ARR RR 422 Jump Starting 26 ee eee eere 433 TOWING cana a a 441 Emi
382. side buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1 This device may not cause harmful interference mmm gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without the
383. side temperature decreases the tire pressure will de crease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
384. ssion Control System Maintenance 450 lora P 447 Air Cleaner 22s e a ma 456 Block Heater uis eh cae em RE 314 Break In Recommendations 0 97 Checking Oil Level 1 2 0 0 2 0 00006 453 Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 00200 466 Cooling x i adists ne ee d cae Me acne 465 Exhaust Gas Caution o o o o ooooooooooo 98 Fuel Requirements 0000000 393 Jump Starting lt lt cee zs we eee y OR ea wd 433 Ol og s eur ai caos Vrae hides ad 453 Oil Filler Cap Lac gr REOR 447 Oil Selection aie eos Res epe o Res eed 454 Oil Synthetic hi ew e a ies 455 Overheating xia enr RU minte Rar rad 420 Temperature Gauge 6 6 eee eee 218 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 71 Ethanol 4 va eee ace i ots eRe Gia eed to 394 Event Data Recorder 0 20 0 00002000 ue 75 Exhaust Gas Caution crosats aa osa iis iie 39 Exhaust System 6 6 apudsa i eee 98 Exterior Lights cadera ae guata S 102 Filters Aur Cleaner emege scettr d 456 Air Conditioning nda sce em RR sa a 305 Engine Qil avui varios a a ber E eR er SS 456 Engine Oil Disposal PlaShetsie cone sic sites Gone ace Es ed ES Glad ala God 420 FUel sags wee oR weet Sees Paley ade ae Hazard Warning dee eor e Sete 420 PAGING orita dope aah regii esae ta Tum Signal 22 i amp s6i 4eR 3 enina eremi degs 102 AddiUves sisi REX REG y RE d Flooded Engine Starting lt o sio matesi s ace o 313 Capacity 5 sd cate a
385. stablished Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic
386. straints with flex ible lower anchors in the center position The inner anchorages are 15 5 inches 390 mm apart Do not install child re straints with rigid lower anchors in the center position 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Can two child restraints be attached us ing a common lower LATCH anchor age No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the cen ter position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard posi tion Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Locating The LATCH Anchorages found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion amp The lower anchorages are round bars that are Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4 In addition there are tet
387. t against the belt path of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passen touch the back of the front passen ger seat and the child restraint is ger seat allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in
388. t is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 022206147 Opening The Liftgate NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the lift gate open with one fluid motion a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicl
389. t the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device WARNING sub menu levels are available on this system e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is PO not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA CAUTION Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Uconnect phone system supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s To enter BTSA mode press either AUX button on the guidelines radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Stream Placing items on the iPod or external USB device ing Audio or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some d
390. tch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Stability Control ESC in Starting and Op erating for further information ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars 334 STARTING AND OPERATING HN An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditio
391. ted through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curt
392. th a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 320 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will ma
393. the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information A STARTING AND OPERATING 385 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adj
394. the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Auto Lock Doors Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e A For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically if e e e The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h
395. the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING Continued another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information Extreme Cold We
396. this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the S
397. tile in a sudden stop or collision e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Fold Down Speakers 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Lever NJ Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held for a maximum of 10 seconds Upon release the wiper will continue to cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
398. tings for high speed wiper operation e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031507503 Windshield Wiper Operation a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washer
399. tinued 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicl
400. tion 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure A STARTING AND OPERATING 363 compact spare tires have the letter I or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards L
401. tion Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi the top of the right rear quarter window This is where mately two seconds the compass sensor is located 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and re
402. tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off imme diately and call an authorized dealer for service 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 21 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 1 inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
403. tions 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA trac
404. to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 358 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available o
405. to do this Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring could lead to accelerated brake lining weal higher Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 1 oT O ODO ias Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 413 057003766 414 STARTING AND OPERATING 75 o LO Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing H
406. to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Com mand amp vRbutton to stop playing memos You pro ceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE Previous to play the previous memo e Tutorial Delete to delete a memo e Voice Training Delete All to delete all memos NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Setup Command VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands To switch to system setup you may say one of the P 5 8 following Voice Training e Change to setup For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect e Switch to system setup s y P Voice Voice Training feature may be used Main menu setup or f 1 Press the Voice Command vRbutton say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice In this mode you may say the following commands Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition Switch to setup Language English Language French Language Spanish a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should
407. tons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code
408. tow a trailer while using a compact Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Ia An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is WARNING required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over brakes when you need them and could have a 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of collision 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure
409. ts When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 23 Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the o
410. ts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 CAUTION CAUTION Continued Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine OAT co
411. ts can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system for further warranty information sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor The air conditioning system contains refrigerant il and refrigerants under high pressure To avoid tisk of personal AIC Air Filter injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper should be done by an experienced technician maintenance intervals 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door 072607165 A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter the housing cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the
412. ts the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable and e The puncture is no greater than 4 6 mm 376 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a
413. tton is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding Uconnect 130 button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Uconnect 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED Refer to your Uconnect user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 042305232 Refer to Voice Command for further details Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Operating Instructions Radio Mode Equipped NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details position to operate the radio 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the
414. ture dial the number you wish to call and then press the Sve button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Sve button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the ke button to begin a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and
415. u can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Changing the Volume e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Streaming mode 3 volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system e System Setup to switch to system setup e Memo to switch t
416. uckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child for the strap between the anchor and the child seat restraint manufacturer s instructions routing it over the center of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to EI the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to 3 x increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly be hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets
417. uel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Pressure Moni toring System TPMS for system operation Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows hours minutes seconds A UNDERSTANDING YOU
418. ugh the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost ov Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Air Conditioner Control NOTE Press this button to turn on the air e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position the recirculation feature will be cancelled only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 04563869 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to improve window clearing Reci
419. ur Uconnect System The priority and then dial The number will appear in the display allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile of certain radios phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the e Press the Ke button to begin Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say 151 1234 5555 Call By Saying A Name After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call Dial By Saying A Number After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook e Press the ke button to begin 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phon
420. urned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 30 4WD Warning Light This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as three seconds When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the 4WD system soon 4WD When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 31 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dis play If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Mini Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive trip information and temperature display NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the
421. usting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor 386 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System i This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check
422. utomatic Transmission e Front Wheel Drive FWD or Four Wheel Drive 4WD e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL wheels OFF the ground e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels e Four Wheel Drive 4WD vehicles must be towed on a elevated flatbed truck all four wheels OFF the ground e FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck CAUTION all wheels OFF the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition is related to the clutch transmission or driveline Ad ditional damage to the drivetrain could result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 All Transmissions If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc while being towed the key must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTI
423. variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option b
424. ve seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can
425. vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without cross bars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Continued 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION Continued WARNING Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle
426. vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 373 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side
427. w defrosting NOTE e The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary For information on operating the Rear Defrost refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 e Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to t
428. weed Se 196 Cargo COVER ue d oo ead os gina x 197 Removable Load Floor o 199 Cargo Tie Down Loops 005 200 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 201 E REAR WINDOW FEATURES 202 Rear Window Wiper Washer 202 Rear Window Defroster o o o 203 ll ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 204 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when CAUTION the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror
429. weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information 404 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
430. y from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly f
431. y song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player an ipod or a microphone and utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratorie
432. your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle INTRODUCTION 5 control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by injury Driv
433. ystem If Equipped Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped A np er ee ee 259 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 239 Wi Uconnect 130 TI FS danke a Gee an 259 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 259 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 A di Plays aie b 263 Notes on Playing MP3 Files 265 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 268 Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 269 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 269 Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play 4 acer x e ces 275 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 277 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play 280 INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play 280 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 281 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 E iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 285 Radio OpSratiott es escoria caprei kerama 292 Connecting The iPod Or External USB CD Player s ak sare eae eae ita ee hes 293 Ibn FREDDIE 286 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 293 Using This Feature oe es 286 E RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 294 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 5 35222 x ss 287 MEA AR Play Mode isse 287 Montel Beating cud ur Condamine List Or Browse
434. ystems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play e Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition
435. zed dealer that sold you your new vehicle has 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These automatic transmission numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 021410235 Vehicle Key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs place the shift lever in PARK rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunc tion occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Ignition Switch Positions Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re 1 LOCK 3 ON RUN 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Con

2014 Jeep Patriot Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents